Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 .

2 .

such as duct. 3 . and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. electrical. electrical panels. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add more detailed modelling elements. fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. Add basic MEP elements. Germany. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. and piping. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows.

and tags. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. NOTE Depending on your installation. you can choose to save your work. Contact your CAD manager for more information. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. views. you learn where the training files are located. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Metric: files for users working with metric units. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. and sheets to document the project. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. to provide a richer and more finished design. After completing each exercise. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. However. Create detail views. is located and accessed in the training files location. your Training folder may be in a different location. templates. such as templates and families. For example. You do not design entire systems. For example. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. however. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. When you open a training file. When you install the training files as instructed. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. annotations. when you add ductwork. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Create schedules. On the Contents tab. In this exercise. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. as well as how to open and save them. So.

and you can open any supported file type. verify that Project Files (*. you are prompted to save the changes.rvt. You may close the file with or without saving changes. if you open settings. and click Save. Accessing Training Files | 5 . If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. click ➤ Save As. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. scroll down. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.rvt) is selected. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For File name. For Files of type. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. 8 If you have made changes. the Open dialog displays. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. enter the new file name. double-click Imperial or Metric. a list of file types displays. 3 In the right pane. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt and make changes. For example. and click the Training Files icon. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 4 Click the training file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

the door retains this relationship to the partition.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In this case. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the parameter is one of association or connection. and phases when you need it. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. schedules. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. If the length of the elevation is changed. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and plans. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. every drawing sheet. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedules required for a building project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. scope. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If you move the partition. You learn the terminology. 2D and 3D view. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. ■ ■ 7 . drawings. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. In the Revit MEP model. sections. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. quantities. hence. drawing sheets. the operation of the software is parametric. the hierarchy of elements. In this case. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the floor or roof remains connected. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.

Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. tags. tags. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. and 2D detail components. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. boilers. and reference planes are datum elements. sprinklers. For example. and electrical panels. dimensions. For example. sinks. filled regions. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. grids. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. When you change something. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. walls and ceilings are hosts. They display in relevant views of the design. sinks. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. ducts. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. levels. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ducts. They help to describe or document the design. boilers.

schedules. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. North . and drawings of the design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. programming is not required. elevation views. Often.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. section views. for example. first floor. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you must be in a section or elevation view. views of the project. To place levels. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. or bottom of foundation. and ceilings. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. In other cases. Project: In Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. In Revit MEP. The project file contains all information for the building design. By using a single project file. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. and types. However. families. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. you can explicitly control them. such as roofs. For example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and so forth). from geometry to construction data. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Most often. If you can draw. This information includes components used to design the model. top of wall.

and similar graphical representation. or layer the views to see only the one on top. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. each in-place family contains only a single type. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families can be transferred between projects. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can be a specific size of a family. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. With a few clicks. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Then experiment with them. A type can also be a style. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can also display several project views at one time. such as a 30” X 42” title block. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example. For example. hiding. System families include ducts. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Unlike system and standard component families. However. showing. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. identical use. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and wires. pipes. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Type: Each family can have several types.

or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To return the panel to the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and for switching views. project and system parameters. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. data and systems. and CAD files. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for editing existing elements.. then select what you want to modify. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. When working on the Modify tab. select the tool first. and settings. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. architect-specific tools.

Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides access to common tools. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. when adding duct. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. provides requested information. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. closes the application menu (double-click). By default. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. For example.

. select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... select a file to open. click. (Export) On the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.

On the application menu. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . Camera. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. but is not enabled by default.. (Print) access product and license information. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file.. and Walkthrough.. or template file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. annotation. (Publish) print the current drawing. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project.. provides views including Default 3D. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. annotation. family. (Licensing) close the file. click. to.

NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . a tool tip appears next to the cursor. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Clear the Status Bar check mark. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. However. When you are using a command. Starting with the most recent command. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. This displays the command history in a list.To undo or redo a series of operations. repeat the command. displaying the same information. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. workshared components. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. When you are highlighting an element or component. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. check the Status Bar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To hide the Status Bar. Group. Modify. To show the Status Bar again. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Clipboard. or the Family Editor. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. In addition.

for example. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. When you place an element in a drawing. Place a Wall. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. click (Modify). Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .To cancel or exit the current command. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom the view In the tutorials. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. click Training Files.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. In the following steps. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 1 Click ➤ Open. For example.

Modifying the View | 19 . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. In the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click . If you do not have a wheel mouse. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. When you release the mouse button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. on the Navigation bar. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 6 Click in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. To modify or add snap increments. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

11 Click and hold the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. moving the wheel to the desired location. 14 To exit the wheel. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and click tin the Options dialog. ➤ Options. As you move the mouse. press ESC. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. called drag controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. display along the ends. 2 Enter ZR. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. and open Level 2 . Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and select the duct. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. These are the drag controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Small blue dots. referred to as shape handles. After you are familiar with these tasks. as shown.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.

In this example. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is.3 Click and drag the bottom control. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the first item in the list. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 6 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. on the Standard toolbar. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.

Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. such as Move and Copy. 11 With the duct already selected. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 10 Move the cursor to the right. The duct is moved to the new position. as shown. and drag it to the left as shown. for example. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . After selecting the element to move.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. In this case.

16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 13 To end a command. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. such as the Modify Ducts command.Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. Select Mechanical .End a command Some commands. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Return.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

6 Click OK. New projects inherit all the families. and loadable families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.rte template. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You can either select a template from the template library. click Training files. such as the default project units and settings. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. the default building levels and standard views. under Create new. Finally. you learn how to start a project from a template. use copy/monitor. and click Open. click Browse. 27 . The template selection may vary depending on your installation. under Template file. You can choose from several templates. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. such as coordination review and interference checking. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. In that case. link files. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. select Project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. create and manage views. 5 In the New Project dialog. settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and geometry from the starting template. such as ducts and pipes. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. system families. 2 In the New Project dialog. and modify system settings.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select School or University. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. and open North. for Energy Data. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. select Level 1. 10 Using the same method. for City. Click Cancel. under Energy Analysis. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. If you want to use a template other than the default. create another new project using the Construction template. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Manchester. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 8 In the drawing area. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click (Browse). you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ ■ Under Create new. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. (Browse). NH. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. click Browse. ■ For Building Construction. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. navigate to Imperial Templates. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. For Location. Click OK. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can select it now.7 In the Project Browser.rte template and click Open. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. When you select the material. In the Choose Template dialog. review the construction materials listed. For example. select Project template. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Click OK twice.

clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Views. click Rectangular. for 3/4". 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 27 Click OK. 4 1/2". click Round.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under.rfa and click Open. and demand factors for electrical systems. for 3 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 26 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. Holding CTRL. and fire protection systems. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 4 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. wiring. click Wiring. power distribution systems. Click OK twice. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. 25 In the left pane. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Categories. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 10 1/2". Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 22 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. piping. under Pipe Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 33 Click OK.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. click Sizes. 5 1/2". and 5 1/2". 11 1/2". 24 In the right pane. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Identity Data. plumbing. After standard settings have been established for an organization. for 3 1/2". and 12 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.

34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. For Sort by. From the Positioning list.rvt. select Project. 5 Click OK. under Template file. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. select View Name. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Family and Type. Click Open. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. For Then by. families. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Associated Level. click Browse. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 38 Close the file. For Then by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open.Origin to Origin. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. and groups that are contained in a project. In addition. select Auto . under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Select Ascending Click OK twice. click Training. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Sub-Discipline. 4 In the New Project dialog. sheets. To enable this coordination. Linking Projects In this exercise.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 15 Under Library Name. click the My Library icon.11 In the Places dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Load. or families. click (Add Value). Save. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. ➤ Open. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and click OK twice. and click Open. templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and select it as the library path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Ignore words in uppercase. 14 Click in the drawing area. 27 Click OK. 22 Select My Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click Edit. click OK. If you want to relocate this path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and decal image files. 23 Click 24 Click OK. This path is determined during installation. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 3 Under Settings. 21 On the File Locations tab. such as bump maps. If you work in a large office. 2 In the Options dialog. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 9 In the text editor. click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 19 Click Cancel. specify the new location here. 5 In the text editor. click Places. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 20 Click ➤ Options. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. custom color files. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 In the Options dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. view the current path. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click the Spelling tab. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Browse. click Restore Defaults. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click Training Files. click OK. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Dimension Snaps. click Edit. 24 In the Options dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. you modify snap increments. work with snapping turned off. 22 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. As you zoom in and out within a view. 18 Click ➤ Options. you modify snap settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Under Settings. under Template file. 23 In the text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click OK. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 25 Close the file without saving it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. You can turn snap settings on and off. In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . and enter 1 . 2 In the New Project dialog. click Close.rte. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.. click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. delete sheetmtl-CU. click the Spelling tab.17 In the Spelling dialog.

if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. enter SM. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . deselect Chain. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. TIP To zoom while sketching. click OK. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and move the cursor to the right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If you do not have a wheel button.7 Under Object Snaps. For example. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. zoom out until it does so. use the wheel button on your mouse. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 10 On the Options Bar. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. This is the increment that you added previously.

19 Enter SM. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. the midpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Close the file. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. If you move the cursor along the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 25 Click OK. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and delete the value 1’ .. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Notice that snapping is once again active. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and the wall edges. with or without saving it. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Do not set the wall end point.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and then you create a plenum level. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This system consists of a cooling tower. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. duct system and a hydronic piping system. However. By following the recommended workflow. you first configure the linked architectural model. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. In this lesson. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you design a mechanical system for an office building. go to http://www. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. As you create the mechanical system. water source heat pump (WSHP). At the end of the tutorial. 45 .Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first plan the system. After finishing each exercise. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. After applying a color scheme to the zones.

The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. NOTE When working with a linked file. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. under Constraints. select Room Bounding. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ceilings. not in the MEP training file. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. In this section. you add a level for plenums.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Training Files. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and after the linked model highlights. roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and click OK.Space Plan is highlighted. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to select it.rvt. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.

Click Plan View Types. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and click OK. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and in the Plan View Types dialog. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). For Offset. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and enter Level 2 Plenum.MEP. The new level is placed. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and double-click West . 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 On the Draw panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 16 Press Esc. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.6 In the Project Browser. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. enter 8'. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).

In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. enter 0. However. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and click Apply Default View Template. Under Extents. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select MEP . 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE After finishing each exercise. For View Classification. Under View Depth. ■ Click OK twice. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. for View Scale. In this exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Default View Template. for Level. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and for Offset. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. enter an Offset of 1' 0". For Cut plane. for Top. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plenum Plan. and then place spaces in various types of areas. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select Level Above (Level 3). you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. and click Properties. select Design. click Edit. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied.Plenum. In the next exercise. for View Range. Under Identity Data. you can choose to save your work.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Sub-Discipline.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. walls. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 2 Plenum. select New. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Offset. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. enter 0. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Upper Limit. For Space.Space Plan is highlighted. select Horizontal. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing Spaces | 49 . and ceilings). This specifies the vertical extent of the space.

for Number. For Name. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK. 9 Select the space. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ensuring coordination between the files.7 Click to place the space. enter 219.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 14 In the drawing area. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Offset. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. and then click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Using the method learned previously. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Placing Spaces | 51 . enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. you place a space in a large corridor area.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. and then press Esc. click Training Files.rvt. for Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. enter 0. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. double-click the space name. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. as shown. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and scroll to the newly placed space. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. enter Corridor. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.7 In the Project Browser. 10 Using the same method. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 9 In the floor plan. In the schedule. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 11 Close the schedule view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space number to 216A. and press Enter. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.rvt. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. If necessary. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a chase. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.

11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Upper Limit. select the space. 12 Click in the section view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 6 Enter VG. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. select Level 3. enter 225PC. For Limit Offset. and click Element Properties. click in the chase area to place the space. In the plan view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . right-click.4 Press Esc. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. Under Identity Data. for Name. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. On the Options Bar. For Number. enter 4'. enter Chase. select Interior and Reference. for Upper Limit. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. enter 0. expand Spaces. 10 In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Offset. select Roof Level. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. and then click OK. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 15 Press Esc. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. floors. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 17 Type ZF. In the next exercises. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan. and click OK. All spaces in the view are tagged. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. under Loaded Tags.Bounding elements (such as walls. and maximize the view. ceilings. select Space Tag With Volume. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.

on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. To display space reference lines.Zoning is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. under Spaces.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View ➤ Zones. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. which removes the space from the Default zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . 3 Right-click in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Training Files. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you view and verify zones in the System Browser.

and modify the zone properties. and a new zone is created. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Computer Lab 222. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. indicating that it’s the active view.5 In the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files. you assign spaces to zones in the building. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Finish Editing Zone. The Zone tool is active. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click 121 Cafeteria. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Using the Edit Zone tab. and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Spaces. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. As you do this. 4 In the drawing area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Occupiable. the Edit Zone tab displays. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. indicating that the space is occupiable. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you assign spaces to a zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Instruction 221. under Energy Analysis. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. click Reference. and Electrical 220 spaces. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. To display space reference lines.

5 With the drawing area active. Expand HVAC Zones. select HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Instruction. Click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.

you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. for Name. click Reference. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Training Files. click Finish Editing Zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. under Identity Data.West . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Spaces. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. To display space reference lines. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.rvt. 9 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. expand 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Area B. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and click OK. In this exercise.West . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You activated zone visibility in the views. 11 Close the System Browser. enter 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view to activate it. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Select Attached End. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 8 In the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc.Zoning view.Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. zoom out.5 Click in the Level 1 .

18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.rvt. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view. you verify the building. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.East. In this exercise.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. on the ViewCube. and click OK. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. for Name Value. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. double-click the zone tag. double-click Level 1 . and zone information. click Training Files. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. enter Lounge . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Front. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.

The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space. and select 109 Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. Click (Highlight). verify that Wireframe is selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.

6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Construction Type. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and then click OK. Next. and click OK. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. click . ■ ■ ■ Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Electrical Loads. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). For People. and then click OK. select 109 Lounge. select 1_South_Lounge. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. Below the list of spaces and zones. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. select Lounge/Recreation. the space information displays for the selected space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the People dialog. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. scroll down in the left pane.■ On the Details tab.

and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and dehumidification set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 12 Using the methods learned previously. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. roofs.00 °F : 90. For Cooling Information. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the cooling set point. floors.00 °F : N/A is specified. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.00 °F : N/A is specified. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and humidification set point. outdoor air per area. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Next.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. verify that 70.00 °F : 54. Below the list of spaces and zones. heating air temperature. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. click (Shading). This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and air changes per hour. This indicates the outdoor air per person. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and other room-bounding components. cooling air temperature. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that <Building> is selected. For Heating Information. verify that 74.

it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum. enter 0. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Offset. select Level 3. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Cancel. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 15 In the Project Browser. open MEP . select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). enter 212P. for Number. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .rvt. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Energy Analysis. click in the Value field. For Location. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Place tab. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.Space Plan. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. space. for Energy Data. NH. and select space Plenum 212P. select School or University. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. enter 03101. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Postal Code. and zone information. double-click Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. verify that Manchester. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . for City.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click Edit. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. is selected. you verified building. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise.

first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. both. and click OK. click in the Value column. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Building Construction. and click OK. For People. verify that Level 1 is selected. ft. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Specified. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. select Specified. a cooling load. and then click . 8 In the drawing area. Under Heat Gain (per Person). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that New Construction is selected. and click OK. and enter 50 sq. for Values. for Building Service. select Library . For Sensible. right-click. you need to select this option. click Edit. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 200 Btu/h. For Project Phase. or neither. and click Element Properties. For Latent. for Values. under Volume Computations. For Ground Plane. In order to select a space. Click OK twice. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Space Type. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that 1' 0" is specified. For Sliver Space Tolerance. ■ On the Weather tab. If. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select space Library 219. Select Area per person. For Export Complexity. this option adjusts the times automatically. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Audio Visual. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. verify that <Building> is specified. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Condition Type. enter 150 Btu/h. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. select Heated and cooled.

Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Click OK twice. for Values. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Electrical Loads. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and under Heating Information. For Building Construction. verify that <Building> is specified. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Manchester. There should be no warnings displayed. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click Calculate. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and click to learn the cause for the warning. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 12 Click the Details tab. click Edit. Under Power. For Building Service. Next. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Select the space associated with the warning. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library.■ ■ ■ Click OK. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. verify that School or University is selected. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. is specified. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Information). You should correct the space error in the building model. NH. and can be modified here. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . for Values. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select 219 Library. select Actual. and click OK. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). You have verified the building information. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Location.

review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 19 In the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. select HVAC Zones. weather. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 15 Review the loads report for project. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. select 219 Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . under Energy Analysis. In this exercise. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. or make any changes to the model. indicating that it’s the active view.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. For Color Scheme. space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . space. 21 Click OK. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 17 In the loads report. and zone information for the building model. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report.rvt. click Training Files. or zone information. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building.Space Plan. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. and a loads report displays.

The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. in 1-ton increments. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.5 Zoom in to the legend. select the color scheme legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .

9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously.

you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . for Select available fields from. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. In the next exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. more category options are available. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Select Schedule building components. For Name. Click OK. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Phase.Space Fill is the active view.12 Close the file with or without saving it. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule. In this exercise.rvt. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Training Files. select New Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

For Type. For Fields. and Blank line. select HVAC. select Airflow Delta. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Formula. and then click Conditional Format. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Browse). ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and click OK. for Formula. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. In the Fields dialog. select Level. enter Airflow Delta. For Then by. Header. Select Ascending. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Level. select Calculated Supply Airflow.■ Under Available fields. Select Formula. and then select Hidden field. enter . For Discipline. select Not Between. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Air Flow. select Number. and then click . In the Calculated Value dialog.

For Background Color. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.■ ■ ■ For Value. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. verify that Show is highlighted. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and click OK. In later exercises. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. ■ The schedule displays. right-click to access schedule properties. a view opens that contains the selected space. In the next lesson. select red. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Under Conditions to Use. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the Color dialog. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Click OK twice. click the color swatch. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . In this exercise. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

78 .

You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you modify air terminal parameters. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After system creation. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you will create supply air systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. and work with the airflow schedule. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

click Training Files.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the ceiling view.

Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 17 Move the cursor down. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. verify that Constrain is cleared.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Also. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . If the host element is modified or moved. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 9 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 425 CFM. the hosted elements are updated as well. as shown. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and then press Esc to end the command. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and press Enter. and then select both Copy and Multiple. and press Enter. for Flow. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 15 On the Options Bar. and select Supply Diffuser . The schedule updates with the new flow data. type 12. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck . NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

24 In the Open dialog. and then press Esc. as shown. 28 On the Placement tab. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rfa. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 29 Place 2 diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. click Place on Face. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Yes. clear Leader. 25 In the drawing area. Next. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and click Open. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.

32 In the Project Browser. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. Level. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click to select the lines. click Yes. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. and click OK. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 44 Zoom in to space 115. ■ ■ For the end point. click the Level 1 line. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .

click Training Files. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. You then create the logical connection between the system components. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.rvt. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. right-click the title. including energy analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.HVAC Plan . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. When you highlight a space. However.Press Esc. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. and click View ➤ Systems. After creating the logical connection. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.

the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. and Flow value. 11 In the drawing area. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. System Name. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 15 Click Cancel. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. the number of elements is updated. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. On the Options Bar. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Connect Into. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 6 Keep the System Browser open. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. review the Number of Elements. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . As you add diffusers to systems. 12 In the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. the air terminals are the children. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for Mark. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and the system connects them. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for System Name. Rename the system Next. 22 Click OK. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment.17 Using the method learned previously. 25 Click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 18 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In this exercise. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . which updates the name in the System Browser. under Identity Data. you create ductwork to physically connect system components.

click Training Files.HVAC Plan. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . the Network type provides several solutions.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). select Network. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Also. In this case. which provides various layout tools.rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. the space crossing lines display. select the upper left diffuser. for Solution Type. and display solution 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 4 In the drawing area. A Generate Layout tab displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

as shown.Round. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Offset. you’ll get an error in a later step. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. click Settings. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Maximum Flex Duct Length.7 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Select Branch. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Click OK. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 3'. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Flex Duct Type. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Duct Type. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. enter 9' 10 1/2".

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. For example.11 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or manually modify the duct. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components.

thus it is not part of the system. for Color Scheme. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. for Values Displayed. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. a disconnection exists. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Usually. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. but not all values are used in this view. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. If the entire network does not highlight. and then click OK. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment.Flow. and click OK. Using a flow-based color scheme. and click to select it. and equipment. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select By View. select Duct Color Fill . highlight a segment of the main duct. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. under Graphics. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. fittings. The first time you press Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.

The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 26 Click OK. and press Enter. select Duct Color Fill . 20 In the drawing area. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and on the Options Bar. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. for Flow. select the WSHP. for Schemes. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Mechanical .Airflow. select one of the diffusers in the system. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. select the color scheme legend. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.Velocity. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.

The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and drag it to the right. Select Restrict Height. highlight a segment of the duct. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. select Calculated Size Only. Click OK. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Select the upper segment of main duct. for Branch Sizing. click Cancel. select Friction. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and select 16". 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and then click to select it. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. and enter . Under Constraints.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. static pressure. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. and pressure loss.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Use the information that displays (flow.

NOTE As you inspect a system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click Finish. click Training Files. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.

and click Draw Duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the WSHP. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 15 On the ViewCube. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. select 9' 10 1/2".Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. click the corner where the Top. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and click Draw Duct. Front. right-click the connector grip. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Options Bar.3D MEP. for Offset. select the top right diffuser. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. NOTE When drawing duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. double-click MEP .

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 22 Using the same method. The ductwork is automatically created. the color fill indicates the flow value. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Also. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it is considered a closed loop. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. in space 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.

33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. and click to select it. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 30 Press Esc twice. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.

under Mechanical . such as a plenum. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. clear Restrict Height. and then click OK. for Flow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. under Constraints. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 40 Using the same method. select a segment of the main duct. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Airflow. and click OK. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. In this lesson. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. 109 . including 2 base mounted pumps. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. Then. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.

and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.2-6 Tons .Horizontal . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 7 On the Options Bar. and select WSHP .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. verify that Wall faces is selected. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown.High Efficiency . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. in corridor 328.Left Return . indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan .

8 Click the corridor wall face. and in the Type Selector. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and enter 2'. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the top edge of the WSHP. as shown. as shown.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. as shown. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Under Mechanical. for Water Flow. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 9'. enter 12 GPM.14 Click Modify. for Offset. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the 2 WSHPs. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. including flow and pressure. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. analyses cannot be performed. right-click the Systems column heading.HVAC Plan . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.rvt. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You can create pipes to connect system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. but without a corresponding system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. 5 In the System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation.Mech 330). where it is easier to review the information.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. click Training Files. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. while pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. 12 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and the Edit System tool is not active. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. select the boiler. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Therefore. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.In the System Browser. for System Name. Assigning a system component to an existing system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Notice that on the Options Bar. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 10 On the Options Bar. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. As you assign equipment to systems. This display indicates that the system is selected.

19 In the Project Browser.Design. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . 17 On the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.13 Click Finish Editing System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. double-click Roof .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. under Design ➤ HVAC . for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. and select the cooling tower. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

expand the Hydronic Return system category. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 28 Using the same method. 23 Close the roof plan view. indicating the logical connection. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In cooling mode. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In.22 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click OK. 29 Right-click CHWS. In heating mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and click Select. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 25 Select the boiler. and click Expand All. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and bypasses the cooling tower. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.

and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component. 32 In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you can view several parameters. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. expand Piping. enter 18 GPM. and click Column Settings. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Properties. for Water Flow.In the System Browser. under Mechanical.

and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.Design is highlighted. select Mechanical Equipment. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . the boiler. you can place the cursor over a system component. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . press Tab to highlight the system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and click OK. 10 Click OK.HVAC Plan . 5 In the Filter dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. A system preview displays in red. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. then the Select a System dialog displays.HVAC plan view range are highlighted.rvt. and click to select it. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.Mech 330). 9 In the Select a System dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select CHWR. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.

■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings. verify that Solutions is selected. structural beams. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. For Inset. or architectural components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 13 Click Cancel. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. duct. select Perimeter. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. enter 1' 6''.11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''.

19 In the drawing area. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally. and press Tab 3 times. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for one WSHP is 18. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and the flow for the other is 12. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. With each Tab. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.

Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Logically.HVAC Plan . 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. On the Options Bar. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. click Edit System.Design. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. which propagates flow throughout the system. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). the Number of Elements is now 8. double-click Level 1 . you physically close the CHWR loop. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Next.

38 Using the same method. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. access its instance properties. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). as shown. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. select a WSHP. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 35 Using the drag control. under Mechanical.

enter 1' 6''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 41 Click OK.40 In the Select a System dialog. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0''/12''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select CHWS. For Inset. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. and then click OK. For Slope. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings.

48 While pressing Ctrl. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 47 In the drawing area. as shown.

52 Close the file with or without saving it. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. To create the piping system. Either relocate the system components.50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.

indicating that it’s the active view. double-click 3D HVAC Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you work in the training file.Design ➤ 3D Views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and the return pipes are magenta. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design is highlighted. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. as shown. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. as shown. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. Click to specify the reference point. select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping.

select the return pipe riser. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and the lower one is secondary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 12 In the 3D view. The connections are automatically created. select the boiler. 13 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click OK. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In.

if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. and press Enter.In a plan view. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and you select 1 connector. enter 1' . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ Move the cursor down.7''. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. enter 2'.

and select it. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the appropriate fittings are created. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. As you place piping runs that are close together.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. as shown. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. 18 Press Esc twice.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . you select the tee fitting.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 28 Press Esc. and when the connector point displays. 27 Move the cursor to the right. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. click to connect to the pump. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.

and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. for Offset. right-click the discharge connector. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 4'. 33 Press Esc. select the primary base mounted pump. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . as shown. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

and click to create the pipe. for Offset. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click Draw Pipe. type 1'. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and press Enter. right-click the bottom control on the tee. enter 9' 6''. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump.

and click Element Properties. right-click. Next. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system.

and click Element Properties. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. notice that under Mechanical. and click OK. 46 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. When you create the pumps in parallel. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 41 Using the same method.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Connect the cooling tower Next. for Cooling Water Flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 44 In the 3D view. 42 Click OK. In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. the value is 0 GPM. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. under Mechanical. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). The flow is being propagated through the piping. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). as shown. select the cooling tower. 43 Press Esc. right-click.50 or 50% of the Flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

rvt. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. Adding Valves In this exercise.50 In the 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. and close the dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.

5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. as shown. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and select Ball Valve . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Press Esc twice. The bypass valve is closed by default.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Valves | 143 .

place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. parallel to the previously placed valve. 12 Select Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.10 Press Esc. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. under Mechanical.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. In heating mode. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. 19 Using the same method. 20 Select the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Adding Valves | 145 . and select Ball Valve . and click OK.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and click Element Properties. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. right-click. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Ball Valve . you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).

You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.22 Using the method you just learned. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. as shown. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. click Training Files. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Initially. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

Sizing Pipe | 147 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK. click Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK.Flow. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Size. for Schemes. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. select Pipe Color Fill .

select Friction.25 FT/100ft. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter 2. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 13 Press Esc. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and for Velocity. enter 5 FPS. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Select And. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Under Constraints. Click OK. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. and click to select the branch. for Branch Sizing.

The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. pressure. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect. Using the System Inspector. click Training Files. or manually modify the pipe. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 149 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select a different layout solution.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. flow. An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. and pressure information including pressure loss. as required. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

and click OK. as shown. 9 Using the same method. 10 Click Finish.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. inspect Section 6 again. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and to size pipe. targeting those systems that need attention.89 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to validate them. In this exercise.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .67 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Fluid Temperature. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. the Static Pressure is 7. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.88 psi.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. For example. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 9 Right-click CHWS. After you assign components to a system. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and click View. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. double-click Level 1 . but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. click Training Files. 6 In the Project Browser. and for pipe sizing. right-click the Systems titlebar.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you learned when placing components. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. thus assigning the components to a system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.HVAC Plan . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 7 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.rvt. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. and double-click Level 3 . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 4 In the System Browser.Design. and click Show to view all of the system components. After you have assigned all components to systems. Warnings display. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.

11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 12 In the System Browser. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise. expand the Unassigned folder. 14 Using the methods that you learned. click Close. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.Design floor plan. and confirm unassigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. right-click Hydronic Return. 13 Right-click CHWR. and select Level 3 .TIP If you have multiple views open. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and click Expand All.HVAC Plan . 10 Using the same methods.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .

select 90. In this exercise you review electrical settings.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. distribution systems. wiring. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Wiring Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select 75. ■ ■ For Factor.rvt. click (Open). For Material. For Temperature Rating.04. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. click Training Files. select Copper. Click OK. As you place components and create circuits. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ For Material. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Select Correction Factor. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. enter THHN. select Copper. expand Wiring . Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.Wire Sizes. For Temperature. enter 1. You also add a wiring type. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog.■ ■ For Value. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. for Custom Colors. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK three times.

Then. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First. 167 . Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to check your design. power circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. Create power loads.

select Average Estimated Illumination. select the color legend.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .00 fc. Click OK. In the Color dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. Under Scheme Definition. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for the Spaces Category. select Orange. select the color for Less Than 20.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 2 In the drawing area. for Basic Colors. click Training Files. click (Open).00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range. You can create additional color schemes.

5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range is satisfied. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 13 Click the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.7 In the Project Browser. which is the lowest value in the specified range. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .5 fc range. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The red field will clear once the +/. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling plan.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 8 In the Project Browser. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.277. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.

20 Select the lighting fixture. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. select Multiple. 25 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the fixtures will move accordingly.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC.

277V. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Click OK.

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

41 On the Options Bar. select Multiple Alignment. Note the changes for the space Library 219. click the ceiling grid line as shown. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. 42 In the drawing area.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

you modify the light fixture IES files. click Training Files. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .45 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open).rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the next exercise.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 2 Tile the views as shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Lighting Plan. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . In the Select File dialog. Under Electrical. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. select T5 [HO]. enter . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.85. ■ Click OK twice. specify 15000. for Color Preset.277V and click OK. and click OK. enter F15. Click OK. select 463T5_S. click the value for Light Loss Factor. click the value for Initial Intensity. for Apparent Load. In the Name dialog.93. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter 162. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ Click Apply. Under Photometrics. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Under Photometrics.00 VA. select Xenon and click OK. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Photometrics. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. for Type Mark. for Lamp. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .00 lm. Under Identity Data. ■ Under Photometrics.ies and click Open.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. enter . ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Color. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.

10 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. select Lighting Fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. Click OK.277V.

15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture.Press Delete.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Junction Boxes. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you add switches. and Receptacles | 183 . Placing Switches. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. junction boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0.rvt.Press Delete. 2 In the drawing area. and receptacles to your design.

5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Placing Switches. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Select Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.rfa and click Open. and Receptacles | 185 . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Under Electrical. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK twice. note the Number of Poles is 1. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. enter JB-1NL. enter 9’0”. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.14 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Offset. for Level 2 . Click Edit Type. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 21 In the drawing area. 15 Select the junction box. for Mark. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Library 219.

22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Name. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Distribution System. Junction Boxes. and Voltage. Select Load. right-click and click Column Settings. Placing Switches. 23 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Expand Electrical. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Click OK. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. 24 For any column. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Select Size. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.

35 Select the dimension and enter 12’.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.

The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 . 38 Select the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. Junction Boxes.

42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files.rvt. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). zoom to the space Electrical 220. and work toward the higher voltage. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .equipment.

Surface: 100A. enter PP-2B.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 480/277 Wye. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 15 On the Options Bar. for Max. 9 On the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . #1 Pole Breakers. select 120/208 Wye.

and for Category. click Check None. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. zoom to space Instruction 221.Loads.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. enter 20. which is the logical connection between the elements. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. for Max. enter LP-2B. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 20 In the drawing area.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

28 Press ESC to end the command. 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

Next you create circuits without showing wire. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 41 In the Filter dialog. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. enter 2. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors. click (Open). except without wire. Click OK. select Wires.Loads. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

■ 16 In the System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. 2 In the drawing area. Rating. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Voltage Drop are selected. Expand Electrical.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 13 In the System Browser. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. expand Power.rvt. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and verify that Load. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. click Training Files. and then expand circuit 1. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Voltage. Distribution System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing.

27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. under Electrical. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 40 Click OK twice. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click below the first one to place it. Click Yes.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 47 In the drawing area. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. for Type Mark. click Edit Type. Click Tags. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click OK. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. enter FR4. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.

204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Next you create a switch system. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. For Circuit Number. Click OK. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 52 In the Save As dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. enter a comma. select Break.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and click Apply. for File Name. 56 In the Filter dialog.rfa. and for Category. Click Save. click Check None. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Deselect Break and for Suffix.

6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. click (Open). 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Switch ID.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. enter a. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. click Training Files. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. under Electrical Lighting. Creating a Switch System | 205 .rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 2 In the drawing area.

Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. under Electrical . for switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Click OK. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. enter b.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.Lighting. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.

5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Next you create a circuit and size wire. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Circuits are used for power. 4 In the Filter dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lighting. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Click OK. select Electrical Fixtures. click Check None. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). and for Category. click Training Files. select the PP-2B panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. click (Open). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems.

navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and in the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.Loads. 19 Click OK. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Wiring. 13 Select the wire again. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 2. and in the right pane.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and click Element Properties. and click Open. Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Hot Conductors. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.rfa.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. and click to select the circuit. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select the PP-2B panel.

and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. as shown. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.26 Press Delete. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.

Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. zoom to space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Finally. Next you balance the loads for your design. select panel LP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.rvt. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Training Files.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Electrical space.

3616 VA). Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 1-#10. 1-#10. Under Electrical-Loads. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and Phase C . and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#12. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Rating. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.3712 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. Scroll down. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 6 Click OK. enter 30A. Phase B 3636 VA. B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.Loads. for Rating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. for Rating. under Electrical . 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.rvt. Next you create a panel schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. enter 25A. enter 30A. click (Open). under Electrical .Loads. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.15 Select panel PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 17 Close the warning dialog. Click OK. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Training Files. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. and click OK. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Select PP-2B.

the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 3/32. under Other. expand Sheets (all). select Berlin Sans FB. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.rvt.Panel Schedules. and open E601 . You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 6 In the Project Browser. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. click (Open). for Font. 4 Close the report. for Appearance. for Font Size. 5 In the Project Browser. enter 1/8. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click Edit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 7 Select the schedule. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Body Text. Under Header Text. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. select Bold and Italic. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click OK twice. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font Size. Under Header Text. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.

press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. select space Lounge 212. In the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Checking Your Design | 215 . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. In the System Browser. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Unassigned. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. 17 In the drawing area. for Panel. 15 In the dialog. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 16 Close the details dialog.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

you create a PVC pipe type. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. In this lesson. in addition to loading existing families. click Duplicate. 219 .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Sanitary. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In this exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Adding a pipe size. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Training Files. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. type PVC . right-click PVC . planning is critical to a successful design. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. and click Properties.Vent. 4 In the Name dialog.

DWV: Standard. For Offset. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 25 For Outside. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Vent is listed.PVC . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. enter 1/2''. Tap. In the Project Browser.DWV: Standard. for Nominal.Sch 40 . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . enter 5/8''. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Pipe Types. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Branch.PVC . 10 On the Selection panel. 18 For System Type. select None. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 27 For the new pipe size. select Tee Vent . under Mechanical. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for Material. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 13 In the right panel. click Training Files.PVC . click Modify. and click OK. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 21 In the right pane. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. and click Main. select Sanitary. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Sanitary. 17 In the left pane. 22 Click New Size. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 24 For Inside Diameter. enter -4' . 15 For System Type.DWV. 26 Click OK. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. enter 10°. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Pipe Settings.rfa. PVC . enter 27/32''.Sch 40 . Cross. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee.0''. Tee. select Plastic.

and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and hot and cold water piping. including plumbing fixtures. add a hot water heater. 221 . Create the hot water system. vent. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. sanitary piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.

Design is open. you add 2 toilets. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. as shown. and verify that Level 1 . including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. 1 urinal.rvt. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. NOTE To identify a space name and number. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Wall Mounted. in the Type Selector.6 gpf. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . as shown. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space.1. 4 On the Element panel. under Water Closet .The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 5 On the Placement panel. and 3 sinks. 1 wall-mounted urinal. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. against the left wall. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. select Public .Flush Valve .

7 Click to place another toilet. zoom in closer. above the first in the standard toilet space. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. and press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. under Urinal . 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . (Again.) 8 Press Esc.Wall Hung.

12 On the Placement panel.2'' Drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 14 Click Modify. In placing the fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . select 5''x5'' Strainer . under Floor Drain .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.Rectangular. click Place on Face. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.

and Default Domestic Cold Water. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and a floor drain. a urinal. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. and review the components listed under this system. In this exercise. click Training Files.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and click View ➤ Piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i.rvt. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors).

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 2 In the Project Browser. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 8 In the Filter dialog. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. clear Lines (<Overhead>). open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click OK. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Plumbing Plan . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that Level 1 . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

12 On the Edit System panel. expand Sanitary. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. so the Create Sanitary System is available. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. If you deselected the drain. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 13 In the Systems Browser. click Finish Editing System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed.

The base is placed. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select one of the components in the system. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. A preview of the piping layout displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. for example. select Sanitary 107. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

for Solution Type. select 4''. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select Main. 26 On the Options Bar.19 On the Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select Intersections. 21 On Options Bar. select Branch. 27 Click Modify. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Slope. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -1' 0''. 24 In the left pane. enter -4'-0”. enter -1' 0''. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click Solutions. You accept this suggested solution. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and modify it to meet project requirements. and click Settings. and click OK. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Diameter. 23 For Offset. The default settings are automatically modified. 25 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. enter 1/8'' / 12''.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. as shown.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select 22''x22'' . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Plumbing Plan . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Rectangular. as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Lavatory .Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Public. in the Type Selector.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 2' 4''. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. On the Options Bar. TIP When entering dimensions. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. For example. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.7 Click Modify.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish Editing System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. and press Enter to create the third sink.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Add To System. Press Esc. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 16 On the Edit System panel.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and click Draw Pipe. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. as shown. double-click 3D Plumbing. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting.In the System Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee. 22 In the plan view. under Design ➤ Plumbing .

In this example. and click Apply. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. When you press the Spacebar. enter 1/8'' / 12''.6''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Offset. and click to draw the pipe.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. press Spacebar. for Slope. enter 2' . 24 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar.

and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . move the cursor over the stub pipe.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double . and when the vertical center line displays. select Standard. 29 In the Type Selector. 30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .DWV. 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC .

and click Draw Pipe. enter 1'. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. 34 Press Esc. for Offset. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. on the Options Bar. In the next steps.33 With the fitting selected. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. right-click the right connector. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 37 Select the fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 6''.

40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method.

and press Esc. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. 47 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify. enter 6''. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.

rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. 53 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. under Trap P . select Standard. 55 In the 3D view. 56 Using the same method.DWV. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.

Move the cursor to the left. In the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .. and press Enter. enter 6''. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. select the left P-Trap.

select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.■ In the 3D view. Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. and select a proposed solution. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. In the Type Selector. select the section of pipe you just drew. click Finish to select the recommended solution.

248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify the slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. for Slope.rvt. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. click Training Files. click Finish. adjusting the sanitary stack. 62 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.

Sch 40 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. select the elbow fitting on the right. right-click the top connector. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design.Plumbing Plan . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . and click to draw the pipe.Design. and click Draw Pipe. 10 In the 3D view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . click Modify. 5 Select the tee. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC .Floor level line.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .DWV. as shown. 3 In the Section view.Overall. 7 On the Selection panel. select Standard. select the vertical stack.

14 On the Options Bar. 18 In the plan view. 12 Select the fitting. 15 Press Esc. for Offset. 17 In the Type Selector. as shown.DWV.11 Click Modify. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. under Plug .PVC . select Standard. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click the rotate control once.Sch 40 . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. enter 1'-0”.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.19 Click Modify. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Plumbing Plan . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 6 In the left pane.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 9 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water.Overall. select Pipe Types: Water. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. verify that the value is 9' 0''. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. if necessary. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 15 In the plan view. and click OK. urinal. and sinks. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 4 In the right pane. click Check None. 14 In the System Browser. for System Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. For Offset. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system.) 10 Click OK. and click Main. for System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views. select Plumbing Fixtures. under Design ➤ Plumbing . For Offset. 17 In the Filter dialog. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and for System Type. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 7 In the left pane. select Branch. double-click 3D Plumbing . (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. enter 9' 3''. minimize the Sanitary system. select Pipe Types: Water. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Main. select Domestic Cold Water. expand Unassigned. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. select Branch.

23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 21 On the Edit System panel. For Flow Conversion Method. In the System Browser. 19 On the System Tools panel. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. click Finish Editing System. click Edit System. enter DCW 107. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system.

35 In the Type Selector. enter 0”/12”. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. for Offset. as shown. enter 3' . select Water. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click to place the pipe. 30 In the plan view. enter 4'0”. and press Enter. under Pipe Types. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the top DCW connector. For Offset. 34 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter.2 7/8''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. click to the left of the urinal. enter 10'. enter 7''. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 37 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. select the sink above the urinal. as shown. 33 Click Modify. for Offset. 28 In the Type Selector. connect the second toilet. select 3/4''. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. For Slope. and press Enter.25 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and click the connector. at the intersection of the water main pipe.

40 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor to the left. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click OK. 41 Select the top sink. 42 In the Select Connector dialog.

add a water heater.44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system.

Overall. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 In the System Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. select the 3 sinks. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . expand the Unassigned folder. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Design is open. 6 In the plan view.

15 In the System Browser. In later steps. you edit the system to add equipment. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. as shown. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 14 Click Modify. and click OK. and click Edit System. in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water. 12 In the Type Selector. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 13 In the plan view. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. When designing systems. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.Tankless. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. Default Domestic Cold Water. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under Water Heater . 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.6 Gallon. 10 In the System Browser. select 0. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). verify that DCW 107 is selected. for System Name.

enter 10’. click Finish Editing System. Offset: 4' 6''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and on the Edit System panel. enter 1' 6''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. for Offset. as shown. 27 Click Modify. and select Draw Pipe.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and press Enter. right-click the middle left connector. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 24 Move the cursor up. Slope: 0''/12''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and click the water main line. 19 Select the water heater. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. select the water heater. 25 On the Options Bar. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''.

36 Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). enter 9' 0''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. select a sink. for Offset. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1''. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 33 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. click Edit System. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 37 On the Options Bar. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. select 4'-6''. and on the Placement Tools panel. as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. for Diameter. 30 On the System Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and press Enter. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1' 6''. and for Offset. and in the System Selector. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater.

39 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. enter 1’. for Offset. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 40 On the Options Bar. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down. as shown.

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.autodesk. In this tutorial. click Training Files. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. go to http://www. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.rvt. 267 . with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 2 Right-click Standard.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.

select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Main. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For System Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. or architectural components. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For Pipe Type. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Fire Protection Wet. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Rename. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that 9' 0" is selected. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Next. For Offset. under Mechanical. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. for Material. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 6 In the Project Browser. However. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and enter Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. In this exercise. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. For Pipe Type. duct. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Carbon Steel. In the left pane. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. and then click OK. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. In the next exercise. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 9 Click OK. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and click Properties. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you modify the type properties of the pipe. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. For Offset.

6 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. For Group parameter under. select the upper half of the building. right-click.Fire Protection Plan . When you highlight a space using the cursor. Under Categories. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Spaces. click Add. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click OK twice. click Training Files. under Fire Protection.rvt. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and click Element Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. enter Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Zone 1. select Fire Protection. and then click OK. the space crossing lines display. 8 Using a crossing window. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select space Instruction 221 as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

click Training Files. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 2. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. including a calculated value parameter. and then click OK. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then click OK. 13 Using the same method. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 10 In the Filter dialog. select Zone 1. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. under Fire Protection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. to which you add various parameters. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.

14 Select the new header. The schedule displays. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter 15. 11 Click OK twice. For Rounding. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Group parameter under. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Length. 6 Using the same method. In the Maximum Spacing column. For Name. Select Schedule keys. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select To the nearest 1'. and on the ribbon. double-click on each column separator. enter Maximum Spacing. and click Field Format. For Key name. for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click the Formatting tab.Design is highlighted. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Type of Parameter. 10 In the Format dialog. Click OK. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Units. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Fire Protection. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 7 Click OK. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. enter Light. Obstructed-Combustible. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. click Add Parameter. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select Feet and fractional inches. select Maximum Spacing.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan .

Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. under Available fields. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. enter 130. select Spaces. For Name. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary.

select Area.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. and click Field Format. click Edit. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sort by. Select Header and Blank line. For Formula. select Sprinkler Zone. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Common. select Fixed. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Number. For Rounding. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Units. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select 0 decimal place. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Discipline. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 22 Click OK twice. under Other. For Then by. click . In the Fields dialog. select Level. select Minimum Sprinklers. and click OK. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Click OK. For Type. for Sorting/Grouping. and click View Properties. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.

for Filter. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. For Fields. 30 Click OK twice. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Level equals Level 2. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. right-click the schedule. for Filter by.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. verify that Use default settings is selected. At the bottom of the dialog. select Level. click Edit. and then click Field Format. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Hidden field. and then select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. 27 In the drawing area.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and click View Properties. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. under Other. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. for Fields. double-click Type. and Count. System Name. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. delete the word Maximum. click Edit. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Embedded Schedule. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. select Calculate totals. select Embedded Schedule. select Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select Totals only. For Category. select Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. for Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 41 In the plan view. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. 43 Click Cancel. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . double-click FP . This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. but their values are not determined. select space 221 Instruction. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and access the instance properties. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. 48 In the floor plan. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. As a result. and click OK. select space 221 Instruction. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. 50 Access the instance properties. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select Light. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you create the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you place the sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. However. click Training Files. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. After finishing each exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. By following the recommended workflow. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.rvt. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. methodology. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. 279 . go to http://www. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you will understand the process. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work. and double-click Level 2 .

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building.

Pendent . as shown. select the sprinklers that you placed. 9 In space Instruction 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. 10 Press Esc twice.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. and select Sprinkler . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and then press Esc. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 On the Options Bar. you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. Next. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Also. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.

You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you adjust the offset. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 19 In the floor plan. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 17 In the Project Browser. 29 Press Esc. 25 Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and press Enter. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. specify a vertical offset. open Design ➤ FP . Notice that the schedule updates.FP_Ceiling view. move the cursor to the right. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and 200C). For Number. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 200B. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 14' 6". enter 10' 6". for Offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. you place non-hosted sprinklers. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .Design. and click Element Properties.Fire Protection Plan . click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Next. enter 11. 18 Type WT. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. This number is determined in the schedule. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.

After creating the logical connection. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.30 Close the file with or without saving it. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. However. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. In the next exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.rvt. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. indicating that it’s the active view. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Fire Protection Plan . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design is highlighted. In this exercise. Unlike logical connections (systems). and with piping (physical connection). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). In the left pane of the Open dialog. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.

As you assign sprinklers to systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. named Fire Protection Wet. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 5 Right-click the header. as shown. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. In the System Browser. and select Piping. click View ➤ Systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. within the Piping Systems folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. select an initial piping layout. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and click Select. 13 In the System Browser. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. For Offset. select Branch. providing system editing tools. 14 Click Finish Editing System. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . verify that 9' 0" is specified. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The Edit Piping System panel displays. click Settings. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. press Tab. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and on the Options Bar. and number of elements in the system. and select the system. system equipment. for System Name.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected.Wet is selected. 15 In the drawing area. place the cursor over a sprinkler. The Generate Layout tools are activated. indicating the logical connection. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and a piping layout preview displays. Next. 11 With the system still selected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. verify that Main is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Pipe Type. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. In the left pane. 19 Click OK. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 12 On the Options Bar. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

When the layout is finished.20 On the Generate Layout panel. and green represents branch lines). enter -12' 0". these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 23 For Offset. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. for Diameter. as shown. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . In general. verify that Network is selected. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and select solution 5. click Place Base. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 22 On the Options Bar. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Solutions. select 2".

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. On the Generate Layout panel. 29 Click Finish Layout. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. as shown. A (parallel movement control) displays. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. click Modify. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers.

and then you create piping to physically connect them. or manually modify the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 If necessary. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Next. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . the Connect Into tool.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Either relocate the system components.

3 If necessary.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. 2 Zoom in. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

radiators. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . verify that Network is selected. mechanical equipment. 9 On the Edit System panel. 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 8 In the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. you can select the pipe or duct. 13 Click Finish Layout. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 14 Close the System Browser. or a system component to display system tools. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and so on) are logically connected by a system. and select solution 5. click Add To System. 18 Click Finish Editing System. for Solution Type. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. verify that Solutions is selected. 5 In the drawing area. air terminals. click Finish Editing System. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and pipe or duct is created. 11 On the Generate Layout panel.

and click Draw Pipe. select 9'. and then tile the views. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 24 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. 29 Using the same method. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. 23 View the result in the 3D view. for Offset. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .20 Open Design ➤ FP . right-click. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

33 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 31 In the plan view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

select 1/4" = 1'-0". 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. click Training Files. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ 6 Press Esc. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4".21 On the Options Bar.

as shown. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 23 Close the 3D view. and maximize the floor plan. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 Using the same method. for Diameter. and then tag the piping as shown. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs).22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 1 1/4". Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The pipe diameter is modified.

In this tutorial. You added tags to pipes. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system. In this exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.

305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Rename. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. 307 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. matchlines. If the view included detail graphics. 2 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and view references. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.rvt. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project.

The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 9 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.rvt. click Training Files. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. views and put them on the sheet. and click OK. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Apply Default View Template. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 4 Using the same method. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 10 In the drawing area. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and click OK. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. more focused. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. create dependent views for areas B and C. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.

for Target view. on the Options Bar. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click OK. 20 Select the upper view reference and.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. click the current value. select 11. select Double Dash 5/8". 14 Click Finish Matchline. 19 In the drawing area. In the Color dialog. Creating Dependent Views | 309 ./ ---). For Line Weight. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 13 Press Esc twice. and then press Esc. For Line Pattern. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. and click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog.

28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references. as shown. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 27 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 25 Using the same method. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.

and click to select it. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and select the section box.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.29 Close the file with or without saving it. select Documentation. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. for View Name. 2 Zoom in. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. For Sub-Discipline. Under Graphics. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. click Training Files. Click OK.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Domestic Water. right-click 3D Plumbing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Plumbing Isometric . 6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. For Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template. The section crop lines no longer display. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for View Classification. select Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. select Plumbing Isometric. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise.

12 Using the same method.9 Right-click. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". Click Apply. press Tab 3 times. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. select 3. and click to select it. and then click OK. For Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Dash. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown).13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. 14 Right-click.

press Tab 3 times.Sanitary Waste. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. Right-click. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.15 Press Esc. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the drawing area. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 18 Using methods learned previously.Domestic Water view with detailing. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. On the View Control Bar. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

21 Click OK twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. Creating Callout Views | 315 . as shown. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. click on the Format value. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. In the Format dialog.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. When the view is associated with a sheet. For Slope. select To the nearest 1/8". verify that Common is selected. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 25 Press Esc twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.

5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. select 1/4"=1'-0''. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale.

select 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all).8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. for Line Weight. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click M601 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Creating Callout Views | 317 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. using the same method. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.

For Title on Sheet. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click the callout view. for View Name.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. and select the viewport. and click Apply Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Default View Template. Click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click OK. under Names. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Apply View Template. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols. 321 . ■ work with model-based components. duct tags. and annotation to create a legend. linetypes.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.Creating Annotations In this exercise. click Training Files. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.rvt. 8 With the text still selected. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).

and then click Right Straight. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. a segment of round duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 16 In the drawing area. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared.9 Press Esc twice. select a supply diffuser.

324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Load.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.rfa. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click Open. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader. and click OK. under Category. for Ducts. 17 Click Modify. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 22 In the Tags dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 24 On the Options Bar. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. If necessary. 20 In the Tags dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.

specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. as shown. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 26 On the Options Bar.25 In the drawing area. and Attached End. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. Creating Annotations | 325 . Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select Horizontal. 31 On the Options Bar.

326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar.

Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Leader Arrowhead. lay out. select the last tag placed. That’s because you changed a type property. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.36 Press Esc twice. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions | 327 . tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and all elements of that type are affected. and click OK. select Dot Open 1/16". you use temporary dimensions to locate. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 37 In the drawing area. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and lock lighting fixtures. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. not simply an instance property.

8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. indicating that it’s the active view. 12 Press Esc.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. and then select the interior face of the wall. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. select the dimension line. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.rvt. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.

19 Using the same methods. and offset them 8' from the wall. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 16 Press Esc. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. annotation symbols.13 Using the same method. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and press Enter. click the 3 interior locks on the line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.3 1/2"). Because the dimensions are locked. and notes. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. Creating a Legend | 329 . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. enter 8'. Creating a Legend In this exercise.

For View. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. Click OK. select 1/4" = 1' -0".rvt. click below the title to place the diffuser. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Diffuser Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Floor Plan. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. click Training Files.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 5 Click in the drawing area.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.8 Neck. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .

11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 27 While pressing Ctrl. The selected detail lines are now thin. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 26 Press Esc. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 21 Press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP and its text note.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 24 Select the component’s break line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.

34 Using the method learned previously. Creating a Legend | 333 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . enter E. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N.

39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. 335 . 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and text.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view. click Training Files.113 East elevation view. detail groups.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.113 East on the sheet. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 4 On the Options Bar. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Next.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. place Power Riser . clear Leader. 8 Using the same method. and click to place it. select each of the 2 panelboards. 5 In the drawing area. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and then modify and align the views.

and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Activate View. and click OK. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. right-click. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. giving the appearance of a single view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Deactivate View.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. as shown. you add wiring to the diagram. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 22 Press Esc. and click Activate View. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. select the 113 East elevation view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

click New. verify that Chain is selected. Under Modify Subcategories. enter Electrical Power. and then click OK. select 6. expand Lines. and click OK.113 North view. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. notice that there are no snaps active. In the Line Styles dialog. for Line Weight. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 2 Close the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. click Training Files. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.rvt. As you draw. as shown. for Name. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar.

10 Press Esc. 11 Using the same method. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8".

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . so that the result is as shown.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Click above the cap. 29 Click Modify. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple.

42 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 0 0. and then press Esc.36 Press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and press Enter. 39 Move the cursor to the right.5. enter 3/32". 40 Press Esc.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 46 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK. select all 3 lines. 47 In the drawing area. for Name. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . while pressing Ctrl. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. enter 0 0. and then press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 50 With the group selected. and press Enter. Using the same method. Press Esc. enter Ground.125. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. click on the length dimension value.25. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. you can ensure that they stay together.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.

and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. TP-2B. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 2 Right-click the copy. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.rvt. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. for Name. and click OK. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.

7 On the ViewCube. and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.6 Select the section box. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and Left sides converge. Back. click Home.

Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Apply View Template. select 3D Views. Walkthroughs. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Click OK. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select 3D HVAC Iso. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Typical. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. (Right). 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left. 19 Complete the text labels.

22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop Region Visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 25 Click OK. and under Extents. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. under Extents. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.

29 In the drawing area. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Place a detail component. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Scale. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select the isometric view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. click Training Files. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select 3" = 1'-0". and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. right-click the view name.rvt. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

Click OK. For View Classification. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plumbing. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 On the Element panel. as the rectangle start point. click the point at the top of the drain. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Documentation. 9 Zoom in to the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 13 In the drawing area. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. for Sub-Discipline. as shown. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Concrete. and then press Esc. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. (Line). Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 23 In the drawing area. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 20 Select 1. 18 With the filled region still selected. select C. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Type. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.P. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . select the filled region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.

29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint.

as shown.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. (Rectangle). Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 45 Using the method learned previously. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

for Name. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 52 In the Create Group dialog. as shown. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select the Flashing Membrane group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and click OK. 49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. press Tab to highlight the chain.. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter Flashing Membrane_F.D. and then click to select them.

57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.55 Press Esc. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

and use the grips to resize the masking region. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.62 Press Esc twice.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 67 On the Options Bar. 72 If necessary. 71 Click Modify. as shown. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click OK. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 64 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.

80 Press Esc twice. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 76 To select the leader start point.

84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

and click to place it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . open P103 . select the view title. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc twice.

■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Black and White. you import a CAD detail drawing. For Layers. click Training Files. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For A-----NPP. select Auto-Detect. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Colors. for Line Weight.dwg. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. select Visible. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select 3.rvt. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Click Open. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. For Import units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Click OK.

12 In the drawing area. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . open P103 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 11 Press Esc. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. select the viewport title. and then press Esc. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.8 Type ZF.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful